Owner's Manual

ManualsBrandsLG ManualsIP phonesB2000

B2000

Please read this manual carefully before operating your mobile phone.

Retain it for future reference.

B2000

User Guide

ENGLISH

B2000

P/N : MMBB0154116 (1.0)

ENGLISH

Summary of content (274 pages)

PAGE 1
B2000 ENGLISH B2000 ENGLISH B2000 User Guide . P/N : MMBB0154116 (1.0) . Please read this manual carefully before operating your mobile phone. Retain it for future reference.
PAGE 2
‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ‪ GPRS‬ﻭ‪MMS‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺩﻳﻞ‪B2000 :‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪.
PAGE 3
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻬﻨﺌﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻝ ‪ B2000‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻷﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﻭﺻﻐﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺼﻤﻢ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻮﺻﻠﺖ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﻭﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻮء ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻟﻪ‪ .‬ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺻﺮﺍﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.
PAGE 4
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﺪﻙ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ )ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ( ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻋﻲ‬ ‫)‪(SAR‬‬ ‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻣﻮﺩﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻝ ‪ B2000‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ .
PAGE 5
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺻﻴﺎﻧﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺩﻳﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺑﻄﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺃﻱ ﺗﺼﺪﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺸﻜﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺧﻄﺮﺍً‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺎﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻓﻨﻴﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻫﻠﻴﻦ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺑﺘﻌﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.
PAGE 6
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺄﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﺑﺄﻗﻞ ﻗﺪﺭ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﺙ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﺙ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺑﻤﻴﻞ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯﻩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻒ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ً‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺑﻼ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﻣﺪﻩ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺼﺮ )ﻋﻴﻦ( ﺃﻱ ﺷﺨﺺ‪.
PAGE 7
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻠﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﺩ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎً ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻋﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻧﺘﺒﺎﻫﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻃﻘﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ )ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ(‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮﺍً‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺖ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.
PAGE 8
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻳﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍً ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺘﻨﺎﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻓﻜﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺍﺭﺉ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺍﺭﺉ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﺑﺪﺍً ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺍﺭﺉ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻠﺰﻣﻚ ﺇﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﺷﺤﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ .
PAGE 9
‫‪ B2000‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪12 ..............................................................................‬‬ ‫• ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ‪12 ....................................................................‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻬﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪13 ...................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪14 ...............................................................................‬‬ ‫• ﻭﺻﻒ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪14 .......................................
PAGE 10
‫• ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ‪22 ..........................................................................‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪22 ......................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ‪23 .................................................................‬‬ ‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ‪23 ...............................................................................‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ‪25 ....................................
PAGE 11
‫‪ B2000‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫• ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ )ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪46 .......................................................... (5-2‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪) GPRS‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪48 ........................................................ (6-2‬‬ ‫ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ )ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪49 ......................................................................... (3‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪50 .................................................................... [1-×-3‬‬ ‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﺎﺹ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪50 .........................................................
PAGE 12
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ )ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪................................................................. (7‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﻔﻀﻠﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪................................................................ (1-7‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻌﺒﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪......................................................................... (2-7‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪..................................................................... (3-7‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪......................................................... (4-7‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ )ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪...
PAGE 13
‫ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻳﻤﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎء ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﺴﺢ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻧﺠﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪#‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪12 B2000‬‬
PAGE 14
‫ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺠﻮﻳﻒ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪SIM‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪/‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪/‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻃﺎﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪13 B2000‬‬ ‫ﻏﻄﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
PAGE 15
‫ﻭﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻒ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ‪ /‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ )ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ( ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ )‬ ‫( ‪ :‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫“ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻀﻴﻼﺕ”‪.‬‬ ‫( ‪ :‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.
PAGE 16
‫ﻭﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎء ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﺨﺼﺺ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻓﻀﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً‬ ‫ﻟﺜﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬ ‫ٍ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪.
PAGE 17
‫ﻭﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻭﻫﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪16 B2000‬‬
PAGE 18
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺭﻣﻮﺯﺍً ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻣﺪﻯ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪.GPRS‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺃﻧﻚ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻮﺍﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻔﻴﺪﻙ ﺑﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻠﻤﺖ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻠﻤﺖ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻠﻤﺖ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.
PAGE 19
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SIM‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪.SIM‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺃﺯﺡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﻜﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻀﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺒﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻉ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SIM‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SIM‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪.
PAGE 20
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺿﻊ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻬﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺿﻊ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻻﺝ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻪ‪.
PAGE 21
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺘﻚ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻃﻘﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﻌﺒﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.
PAGE 22
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﻓﺼﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﺎً ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﺘﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻓﺄﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.
PAGE 23
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻨﺎً ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺃﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺃﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺩﺋﺔ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺃﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ” ‪ “ +‬ﺑﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺃﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫]ﺃﺳﻤﺎء[‪.
PAGE 24
‫ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1-1‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ[ ﻟﻮﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ[ ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪ 2-1‬ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 25
‫ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪ 4-1‬ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ‬ ‫]ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺃﻥ ﻳﻨﺒﻬﻚ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺠﺮﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ”ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ“‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻋﻤﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻄﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 26
‫ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪ 8-1‬ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ‪SIM‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ‪ SIM‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫]ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ[‪ .
PAGE 27
‫ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪ 4-2‬ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻋﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻋﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ‪/‬ﺿﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫‪ 5-2‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ‬ ‫ﻟﻀﻢ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﺑﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫]ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ‪/‬ﺇﺷﺮﺍﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 6-2‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ‬ ‫ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﻳﻦ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 28
‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻬﺎﺗﻔﻚ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺭﻣﺰﻱ ‪ PUK‬ﻭ‪(PUK2‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.[4-4-6‬‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ 4) PIN‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 8‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ(‬ ‫ﻳﺤﻤﻲ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪) PIN‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ( ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺧﺺ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﺮﻓﻖ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ PUK‬ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ .SIM‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ PIN‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻄﺎﻟﺒﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ PIN‬ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪ .
PAGE 29
‫ﺳﺮﺩ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬ ‫‪ 7‬ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ 8‬ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ‬ ‫‪ 9‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻋﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﻫﺎﺩﺉ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪GPRS‬‬
PAGE 30
‫ﺳﺮﺩ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪FM‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪ 7‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺡ ﻭﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺘﻲ‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻲ‬ ‫‪ 7‬ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫‪ 8‬ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪ 8‬ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺫﻫﺎﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪URL‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ 7‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺗﺼﺪﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ 8‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬ ‫‪ 9‬ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪ 9‬ﺟﺎﻓﺎ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬ ‫‪ 10‬ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪SIM‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺘﻤ
PAGE 31
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[1‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﺨﺪﻣﺔ ‪) SMS‬ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮﺓ( ﻭ‪MMS‬‬ ‫)ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ( ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[1-1‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ‪.
PAGE 32
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[1‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﺎﻣﻮﺱ ‪T9‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﺆﻱ )‪(T9Abc/T9abc/T9ABC‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ‪T9‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪.T9‬‬ ‫• ﺇﻧﻬﺎء‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﺘﺒﺘﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 33
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[1‬‬ ‫ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[1-2‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ‪.
PAGE 34
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[1‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﺎﻣﻮﺱ ‪T9‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﺆﻱ )‪(T9Abc/T9abc/T9ABC‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ‪T9‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪.T9‬‬ ‫• ﺇﻧﻬﺎء‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )ﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ ‪ 15‬ﻙ( ﻋﻨﺪ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ 15‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‪ .
PAGE 35
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[1‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪T9‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ‪ T9‬ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ‪ ،T9‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻻ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺘﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻣﻮﺱ ﻣﻀﻤﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ‪.T9‬‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺣﺮﻑ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ‪ girl‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪،‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 36
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[1‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺻﺤﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ :‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻛﺘﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ :‬ﻓﺎﺑﺤﺚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ‪ :‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺘﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫]ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ[ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﺆﻱ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﺎﻣﻮﺱ ‪.“T9‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.
PAGE 37
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[3-1‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻚ ﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬ ‫]‬ ‫[ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫]‬ ‫[ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ‬ ‫]‬ ‫[ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪SIM‬‬ ‫]‬ ‫[ ﻣﻘﺮﻭءﺓ‬ ‫]‬ ‫[ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﻼﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ”‪ SIM‬ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ“‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫‪ SIM‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ ”ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ“‪ .
PAGE 38
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[1‬‬ ‫ﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻌﺎﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺍﺳﻞ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺘﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ‪ :‬ﻛﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ )ﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ( ﻭﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.
PAGE 39
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬ ‫]‬ ‫[ ﻣﺮﺳﻠﺔ‬ ‫]‬ ‫[ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺳﻠﺔ‬ ‫]‬ ‫[ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﻴﻢ‬ ‫]‬ ‫[ ﺛﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫* ﻣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﻴﻦ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻛﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ )ﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ( ﻭﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺴﻠﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 40
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻮﺩﺓ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[5-1‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺴﻮﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺳﺮﺩ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻆ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬ ‫]‬ ‫[ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫]‬ ‫[ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ‬ ‫]‬ ‫[ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺴﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫]ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.
PAGE 41
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[6-1‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[7-1‬‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻲ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﻠﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ .GSM‬ﻭﻫﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻘﺎﺭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﻘﺲ ﻭﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻭﺳﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻴﺪﻟﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ‪ .‬ﻳﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ .
PAGE 42
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[1‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[8-1‬‬ ‫ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[1-8-1‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ‪ 6‬ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻞء ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ >ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻟﻴﺔ<‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[2-8-1‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺘﻚ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻻﺣﻘﺎً‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﻔﻆ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ“ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ‪.
PAGE 43
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[1‬‬ ‫• ﺇﻧﻬﺎء‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﻊ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[3-8-1‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﺍﻛﺘﺐ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﻛﺲ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[9-1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮﺓ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[1-9-1‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﻭﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻭﻓﺎﻛﺲ ﻭﻣﻨﺎﺩﺍﺓ ‪ Natl‬ﻭ‪ X.400‬ﻭﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻭ‪ERMES‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.
PAGE 44
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[1‬‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[2-9-1‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﻓﻀﻠﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺼﻮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻼﺣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺘﻚ ﺑﻨﺠﺎﺡ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻣﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺁﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ :‬ﻳﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 45
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[1‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[3-9-1‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻭﻓﻘﺎً ﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ‪.
PAGE 46
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[1‬‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻓﻊ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[5-9-1‬‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺴﻠﻤﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 47
‫ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[2‬‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[1-2‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﺆﺧﺮﺍً‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[2-2‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﺆﺧﺮﺍً‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[3-2‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻣﺆﺧﺮﺍً‪ .
PAGE 48
‫ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﻭﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[2-5-2‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﻭﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺻﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪.PIN2‬‬ ‫]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪.
PAGE 49
‫ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[2‬‬ ‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺻﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺘﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﺴﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﺮﺽ ﺁﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺘﻚ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪] GPRS‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[6-2‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪.
PAGE 50
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[3‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺗﺨﺼﻴﺼﻬﺎ ﻟﻸﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻭ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ( ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻓﻲ ً‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻚ ﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‪.
PAGE 51
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[3‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻃﻘﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺿﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺼﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[1-×-3‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺸﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﺎﺹ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[2-×-3‬‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻟﻠﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.
PAGE 52
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[3‬‬ ‫ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮ ﻟﻴﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ /‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻟﻴﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻼ ﺑﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺃﻭ ﻃﻘﻊ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺳﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ 5‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪.
PAGE 53
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[4‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺎﺳﺒﻚ ﻭﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻔﻀﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[1-4‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[1-1-4‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[2-1-4‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻳﻮﻡ ‪ /‬ﺷﻬﺮ ‪ /‬ﺳﻨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺷﻬﺮ ‪ /‬ﻳﻮﻡ ‪ /‬ﺳﻨﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ /‬ﺷﻬﺮ ‪ /‬ﻳﻮﻡ ‪.
PAGE 54
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[4‬‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺣﻴﺐ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[2-2-4‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[3-2-4‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺆﺛﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[4-2-4‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪] LCD‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[5-2-4‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪،‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 55
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[4‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[3-4‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[1-3-4‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﻛﺲ ﻭﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺑﻼ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻧﺸﻐﺎﻝ‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻻ‪.
PAGE 56
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‬‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻛﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﻛﺲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺁﺧﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻔﻀﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺁﺧﺮ ‪ 5‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء‬‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 57
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[4‬‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[3-3-4‬‬ ‫)ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍً ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ(‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤُﺘﻔﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[4-3-4‬‬ ‫)ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍً ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ(‬ ‫• ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‪ ،‬ﻗﺒﻮﻝ )ﺗﻠﻘﻲ( ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﻟﻐﺎء‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء‪ ،‬ﻗﺒﻮﻝ )ﺗﻠﻘﻲ( ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪.
PAGE 58
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[3‬‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[7-3-4‬‬ ‫)ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍً ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ(‬ ‫ﻳﺤﻈﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺻﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﺤﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻞ )ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻅ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻔﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ‪ CUG‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.
PAGE 59
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[4‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[4-4‬‬ ‫ﻃﻠﺐ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪] PIN‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[1-4-4‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ PIN‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻄﻠﺐ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪.PIN‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ PIN‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ PIN‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺖ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ PIN‬ﺧﻄﺄ ﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 3‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .
PAGE 60
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[4‬‬ ‫ﺣﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[4-4-4‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻨﻊ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺣﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﻓﺌﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺤﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻫﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻈﺮ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍ ﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻈﺮ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍ ﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻈﺮ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ‪.
PAGE 61
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[4‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[5-4-4‬‬ ‫)ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍً ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(SIM‬‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻫﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ‪.PIN2‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻫﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﻟﻐﺎء‬ ‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻛﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[6-4-4‬‬ ‫‪ PIN‬ﻫﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺧﺺ ﺑﻪ‪.
PAGE 62
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[4‬‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[2-5-4‬‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﻳﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﺗﺠﻮﺍﻝ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻓﺸﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﻀﻠﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[3-5-4‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻭﺳﻴﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﻠﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً‪.
PAGE 63
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻖ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[5‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[1-5‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ 5‬ﺃﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺒﻪ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪ :‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﻣﻦ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺍﻻﺛﻨﻴﻦ ~ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻌﺔ ﻭﻣﻦ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺍﻻﺛﻨﻴﻦ ~‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺖ ﻭﻛﻞ ﻳﻮﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[2-5‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .
PAGE 64
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻖ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[5‬‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[1-2-5‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪ 39‬ﺣﺮﻓﺎً ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻭﺗﺪﻭﻳﻦ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 20‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[2-2-5‬‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻟﻠﻤﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ‪ .
PAGE 65
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻖ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[5‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[3-5‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫]ﺃﺳﻤﺎء[ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺤﺚ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[1-3-5‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ(‬ ‫]ﺃﺳﻤﺎء[‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ“ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.
PAGE 66
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻖ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[5‬‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[2-3-5‬‬ ‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 200‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SIM‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺣﻔﻆ ‪ 25‬ﺣﺮﻓﺎً ﻟﻼﺳﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SIM‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SIM‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫]ﺃﺳﻤﺎء[ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.
PAGE 67
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻖ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[5‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻀﻮ‬ ‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻋﻀﺎء ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﻋﻀﺎء ﻛﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﻦ ‪ 20‬ﻋﻀﻮﺍً‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻋﻀﻮ‬ ‫ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻋﻀﻮ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻋﻀﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻳﻈﻼﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[4-3-5‬‬ ‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 3‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ً‬ ‫]ﺃﺳﻤﺎء[ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[‪.
PAGE 68
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻖ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[5‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺤﺚ ﺣﺴﺐ‬ ‫]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺣﺴﺐ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺴﺄﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪.‬‬‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬‫‪ -‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[6-3-5‬‬ ‫ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ‪ /‬ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻜﺲ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.
PAGE 69
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻖ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[5‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[8-3-5‬‬ ‫• ﺭﻗﻢ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻮﻓﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫)ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺗﺪﻋﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.(SIM‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫]ﺃﺳﻤﺎء[ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ .
PAGE 70
‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪] FM‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[6‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ )‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[1-6‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪ FM‬ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ )‬ ‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 71
‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪] FM‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[6‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻹﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﻪ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ “ﺗﻢ” ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 10‬ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ً‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ )ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫]ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ[‪.
PAGE 72
‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪] FM‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[6‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ “ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ” ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺃﻭﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴًﺎ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[2-6‬‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪.
PAGE 73
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺡ ﻭﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[7‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[1-7‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 9‬ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻏﺎﻟﺒﺎً ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ >ﻓﺎﺭﻍ< ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻛﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬‫‪ :‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬‫‪ :‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺣﺬﻑ‬‫ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ‪ :‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪.
PAGE 74
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺡ ﻭﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[7‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[3-7‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪:÷ ،× ،- ،+‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺮﺡ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺴﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ[ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺤﻮ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 75
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺡ ﻭﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[7‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[5-7‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫‪،‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪ .
PAGE 76
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺡ ﻭﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[7‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[2-7-7‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺬﻛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺬﻛﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻭﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[8-7‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﻍ ﻭﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻞ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ ‪ /‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ‪ PC Sync‬ﻫﻮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻟﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .
PAGE 77
‫ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[8‬‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ )‪ .(WAP‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﻷﺧﺒﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﻘﺎﺭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﻘﺲ ﻭﻣﻮﺍﻋﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[1-8‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺸﻂ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[2-8‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻟﻺﻧﻬﺎء‪.
PAGE 78
‫ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[8‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‬‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫• ‪GPRS‬‬ ‫ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻛﺤﺎﻣﻞ ‪ /‬ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ : IP‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ IP‬ﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ ‪ WAP‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻗﻢ ‪ :‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪ WAP‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ :‬ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ )ﻭﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ‪(WAP‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻄﻠﺒﻬﺎ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ )ﻭﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‬ ‫‪ (WAP‬ﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻔﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .
PAGE 79
‫ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[8‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ )ﺑﻼ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ( ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺆﻛﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪HTTP‬‬ ‫ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻓﻘﺎً ﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫• ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎً‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺨﺎﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺫﻫﺎﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪] URL‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[4-8‬‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ URL‬ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪.
PAGE 80
‫ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[8‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[5-8‬‬ ‫ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[1-5-8‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[2-5-8‬‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻓﺤﺼﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[6-8‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.
PAGE 81
‫ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[8‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[8-8‬‬ ‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[9-8‬‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ‪.
PAGE 82
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[1-8‬‬ ‫• ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[2-8‬‬ ‫• ﺣﻔﻆ ﻛﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻛﻌﻼﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺎﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪URL‬‬ ‫ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺤﻮ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.
PAGE 83
‫ﺟﺎﻓﺎ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[9‬‬ ‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[1-9‬‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺟﺎﻓﺎ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪ :‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ‪Java MIDP‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺣﻮﻝ‬ ‫‪ :‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ‪ MIDlet‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ :‬ﻳﺤﺬﻑ ‪ MIDlet‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ‬ ‫‪ :‬ﻳﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ ﻭﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ‪MIDlet‬‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ‬ ‫‪ :‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺟﺎﻓﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻹﻛﻤﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ .
PAGE 84
‫ﺟﺎﻓﺎ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[9‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[3-9‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺟﺎﻓﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﻋﺒﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ‪ 5‬ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻭﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﺒﻪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺏ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺏ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ JAVA TM‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 85
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻟﺠﻮﺍﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﺣﺎﺟﺘﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻠﻴﻔﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻮﺻﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻮﺍﻟﻚ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺳﻔﺮ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﺪﻙ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ‪.
PAGE 86
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻋﻄﺎﻝ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﺮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﻬﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﻚ ﺑﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺃﻏﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﻬﻬﺎ ﻳﺴﻬﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ‬ ‫ﺣﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SIM‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺘﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SIM‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺿﻌﻒ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺍﻓﺬ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.
PAGE 87
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻋﻄﺎﻝ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﺎً ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻌﺪﻯ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻣﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻔﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺟﻬﺪ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻻ ﻳﺴﺨﻦ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻪ‪.
PAGE 88
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ‪B2000 :‬‬ ‫‪PCS 1900 /DCS 1800 / GSM 900 :‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ‬ ‫‪ 3.7 :‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ 4.2 :‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺳﻔﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺮﺝ‬ ‫‪ 240 – 100 :‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‪ 60/50 ،‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 5.
PAGE 89
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ‪ GPRS‬ﻭ ‪MMS‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻝ‪B2000 :‬‬ ‫ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺩﻗﺖ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 90
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﺸﻜﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺮﻳﺪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻣﻮﺑﺎﻳﻞ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺍﻝ‪.‬ﺟﯽ ‪ B2000‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮژی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺣﺎﻭی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻬﻤﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﯽﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ ﻭ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ‬ ‫ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺻﻼﺣﯽ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺫﻛﺮ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻟﻐﻮ‬ ‫ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 91
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎﻙ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻧﺮژی ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻣﻮﺍﺝ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺟﺬﺏ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ‬ ‫)‪(SAR‬‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻣﻮﺑﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺪﻝ ‪ B2000‬ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍی ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩی‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻣﻮﺍﺝ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.
PAGE 92
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺖ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﻭ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ‬ ‫ﻟﻐﻮ ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻗﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﮔﺎﺭﺍﻧﺘﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﯽﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻜﻨﺴﻴﻦ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 93
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ‪ ،‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎً‪:‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫• ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻦ‬ ‫ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﺭﻭی ﺷﺎﻧﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﯽﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﺷﻌﻪ ﻣﺎﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺍﺷﻌﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﭼﺸﻢ ﻛﺴﯽ ﻧﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 94
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻣﻮﺑﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪﺍی ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍﻧﻨﺪﮔﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﯽﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺭﺍﻧﻨﺪﮔﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺭﺍﻧﻨﺪﮔﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻨﺪﺯﻓﺮی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺩﺭﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺭﺍﻧﻨﺪﮔﯽ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺒﻴﻞ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﺟﺎﺩﻩ ﭘﺎﺭﻙ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 95
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻮﺍﭘﻴﻤﺎ ﺭﻭی ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻛﺴﺐ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﭘﺮﻭﺍﺯ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻮﺩﻛﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻛﻮﺩﻛﺎﻥ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺷﻮﻧﺪﻩ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺧﻔﮕﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱﻫﺎی ﺿﺮﻭﺭی‬ ‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﺗﻤﺎﺱﻫﺎی ﺿﺮﻭﺭی ﺗﺤﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻠﻮﻟﯽ ﻣﻴﺴﺮ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﻧﻤﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﺗﻤﺎﺱﻫﺎی ﺿﺮﻭﺭی ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻣﻮﺑﺎﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺗﻜﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 96
‫‪ B2000‬ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ‬ ‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ‪12 ..................................................................‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺟﻠﻮی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪12 ......................................................................‬‬ ‫• ﭘﺸﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪13 ...............................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪14 ......................................................................................‬‬ ‫• ﺷﺮﺡ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪14 .................................................
PAGE 97
‫• ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ‪22 .....................................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ ‪23 ........................................................................‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻨﯽ ‪23 .........................................................................‬‬ ‫• ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﭼﻨﺪﻧﻔﺮﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻨﻔﺮﺍﻧﺴﯽ ‪25 ............................................................‬‬ ‫ﻛﺪﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ‪...............................................................................
PAGE 98
‫‪ B2000‬ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬ ‫• ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ‪] GPRS‬ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪48 ......................................................... [٢-۶‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪....................................................................... [٣‬‬ ‫‪49‬‬ ‫‪50‬‬ ‫‪50‬‬ ‫‪51‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻥ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪................................................................ [٣ -x-١‬‬ ‫• ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪.................................................................. [٣ -x-٢‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪..................................................
PAGE 99
‫• ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﺪﻩ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪...................................................................... [٧-١‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺎﺯی ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪......................................................................... [٧-٢‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦﺣﺴﺎﺏ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪................................................................. [٧-٣‬‬ ‫• ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪............................................................... [٧-۴‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪................................................................ [٧-۵‬‬ ‫• ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺟﻬﺎﻧﯽ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪....................
PAGE 100
‫ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬ ‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺟﻠﻮی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺶ ﻫﺪﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﺪﻩﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ‪ /‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‪ /‬ﻟﻐﻮ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﻮﺭی ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی ﻋﺪﺩی‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﻩ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻫﺎﺷﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻦ‬ ‫‪ B2000‬ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪12‬‬
PAGE 101
‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬ ‫ﭘﺸﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻛﺖ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ‪ /‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻫﻨﺪﺯﻓﺮی‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻃﺮی‬ ‫‪ B2000‬ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪13‬‬ ‫ﭘﻮﺷﺶ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻃﺮی‬
PAGE 102
‫ﺷﺮﺡ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ‪ /‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺁﻥ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻭ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫• ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﺎﻻ )‬ ‫( ‪ :‬ﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﺒﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی‬ ‫ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﺪﻩ ﻫﺎ‪.
PAGE 103
‫ﺷﺮﺡ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎﺕ‬ ‫~‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی ﻋﺪﺩی‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﻋﻤﺪﺗﺎً ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﮔﻴﺮی ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﯽﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫• ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﯽﺭﻭﺩ‬ ‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻠﻔﻦﻫﺎی ﺑﻴﻦﺍﻟﻤﻠﻠﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﯽﺭﻭﺩ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﯽﺭﻭﺩ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ‪ /‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ‪ .
PAGE 104
‫ﺷﺮﺡ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی ﺣﺮﻭﻑ‬ ‫ﻫﺮ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺳﻤﺒﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ B2000‬ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪16‬‬
PAGE 105
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﺮﻳﺢ ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖﻫﺎی ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ‪ /‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ‪ GPRS‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭﻣﻴﻨﮓ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﻧﮓ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩﺍﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 106
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫‪ ١‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﺳﻮﮐﺖ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ١‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ٢‬ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻮﺭی ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺷﻴﺎﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﻧﻘﺮﻩ ﺍی ﺭﻧﮓ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬ ‫ﻃﻼﻳﯽ ﺁﻥ ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ٢‬ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ١‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ٢‬ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 107
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫‪ ٣‬ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی‬ ‫‪ ١‬ﺯﺍﺋﺪﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﻭ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ٢‬ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺗﺎ ﺻﺪﺍی‬ ‫”ﮐﻠﻴﮏ“ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺸﻨﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ٣‬ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺻﺪﺍی‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﺑﺪﻫﺪ‪.
PAGE 108
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫‪ ۴‬ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺳﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ١‬ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭ ﮐﻪ ﭘﻴﮑﺎﻥ ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺳﺮ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺻﺪﺍی ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺟﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺷﻬﺮی‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺭﺗﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ‬ ‫• ﻫﻴﭽﮕﺎﻩ ﺳﻮﻛﺖ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 109
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫‪ ۵‬ﺟﺪﺍ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪﻫﺎی ﻛﻨﺎﺭی ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭی ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﺡ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭﺳﻴﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺟﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻧﻤﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪،‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 110
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻭ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬ ‫‪ ١‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻛﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﯽﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻨﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺘﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱﻫﺎی ﺑﻴﻦﺍﻟﻤﻠﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﻴﺶ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﻴﻦﺍﻟﻤﻠﻠﯽ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ »‪ «+‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫‪ ١‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺪ ﺑﻴﻦﺍﻟﻤﻠﻠﯽ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ٢‬ﻛﺪ ﻛﺸﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻛﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 111
‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖﻫﺎی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻣﯽﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏﻫﺎی ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺫﻳﻞ ﺗﺸﺮﻳﺢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ١‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻨﯽ‬ ‫‪ ١-١‬ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬ ‫]ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ[ ﺭﺍ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺟﻬﺖ‬ ‫]ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ١-٢‬ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﻭﻡ‬ ‫]ﻧﺎﻣﻬﺎ[ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 112
‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ‬ ‫‪ ١-۴‬ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﻩ )ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ(‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﻩ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺯﻧﮓ ﻣﯽﺯﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫]ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻚ‬ ‫ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺩﺭ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ‬ ‫ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪ ۴-٣-۴‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 113
‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ‬ ‫‪ ٢‬ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﻔﺮﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻨﻔﺮﺍﻧﺴﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﻔﺮﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻨﻔﺮﺍﻧﺴﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻔﺮ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﯽﺳﺎﺯﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻣﯽﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﻔﺮﻩ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬ ‫ﭘﺸﺖ ﺧﻂ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮﺩﻭ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﻔﺮﻩ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .
PAGE 114
‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ‬ ‫‪ ٢-۴‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﻔﺮﻩ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﻔﺮﻩ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ]ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ[‬ ‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻦ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﻔﺮﻩ‪/‬‬ ‫‪ ٢-۵‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﻪ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﻔﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻦ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﭼﻨﺪﻧﻔﺮﻩ ﺩﺭﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﻔﺮﻩ‪ /‬ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻦ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ[ ﻭ‬ ‫‪ ٢-۶‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﻔﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﻫﺎی ﺗﻤﺎﺱﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﻔﺮﻩ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 115
‫ﻛﺪﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺪﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺯﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﮐﺪﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ )ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎی ﻛﺪﻫﺎی ‪ PUK‬ﻭ ‪ (PUK2‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ]ﻣﻨﻮ ‪ [۴-۴-۶‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ PIN‬ﻛﺪ )‪ ٨‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ۴‬ﺭﻗﻤﯽ(‬ ‫‪ PIN‬ﻛﺪ )ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ( ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﺠﺎﺯ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻣﯽﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻅ ﻣﯽﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .
PAGE 116
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﯽ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‬ ‫‪ ٣‬ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪ ١‬ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪ ١‬ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡﻫﺎی ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ‬ ‫‪ ٢‬ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ‬ ‫‪ ٣‬ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی‬ ‫‪ ۴‬ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ‬ ‫‪ ۵‬ﭘﻴﺶﻧﻮﻳﺲﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪ ۶‬ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‬ ‫‪ ٧‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺗﯽ‬ ‫‪ ٨‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪ ٩‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ ١‬ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ‬ ‫‪ ٢‬ﺑﻠﻨﺪ‬ ‫‪ ٣‬ﻫﺪﺳﺖ‬ ‫‪ ۴‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪ ۵‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﻳﺒﺮﺍﺗﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪ ۶‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ‬ ‫‪ ۴‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ ٢‬ﺛﺒﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫‪ ١‬ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ‬ ‫‪ ٢‬ﺗﻤﺎﺱﻫﺎی ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻩ‬ ‫‪ ٣‬ﺗﻤﺎﺱﻫﺎی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫‪ ۴‬ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﺱﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪۵‬ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫‪ ۶‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ‪GPRS‬‬ ‫‪ ١‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﻭﻗﺖ‬
PAGE 117
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﯽ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‬ ‫‪ FM ۶‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪ ١‬ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪ ٢‬ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪ ٧‬ﺑﺎﺯی ﻭ ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣﯽ‬ ‫‪ ١‬ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﺪﻩ‬ ‫‪ ٢‬ﺑﺎﺯی‬ ‫‪ ٣‬ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‬ ‫‪ ۴‬ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ‬ ‫‪ ۵‬ﻣﺒﺪﻝ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪ ۶‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺟﻬﺎﻧﯽ‬ ‫‪ ٧‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍ‬ ‫‪ ٨‬ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫‪ ١‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ‫‪ ٢‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬ ‫‪ ٣‬ﭘﺮﻭﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬ ‫‪ ۴‬ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ‪URL‬‬ ‫‪ ۵‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ‬ ‫‪ ۶‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻛﻮﻛﯽﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪ ٧‬ﮔﻮﺍﻫﯽ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺘﯽ‬ ‫‪ ٨‬ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﭘﺮﻭﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬ ‫‪ ٩‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﮔﺮ‬ ‫‪ ٩‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩی‬ ‫‪ ١‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩی‬ ‫‪ ٢‬ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ‬ ‫‪ ٣‬ﭘﺮﻭﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪ ١٠‬ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎ
PAGE 118
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻣﻬﺎ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[١‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ‪) SMS‬ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ(‪MMS ،‬‬ ‫)ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ(‪ ،‬ﭘﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﺎﻥ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[١-١‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻦ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ١‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫]ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ[ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻨﻮی ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡﻫﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﯽﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ٣‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ‪ T9 ،‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪ .
PAGE 119
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻣﻬﺎ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[١‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺳﺎﻳﺰ ﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻓﻮﻧﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺭﻧﮓ‬ ‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻭ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻳﯽ ﻣﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻳﺎ ﭼﭗ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻟﻐﺘﻨﺎﻣﻪ ‪T9‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﻴﺸﮕﻮﻳﯽ )‪ (T9Abc/T9abc/T9ABC‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎی ‪T9‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ‪ T9‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 120
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻣﻬﺎ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[١‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[١-٢‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﻭ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ[ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ١‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﯽﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﭼﻨﺪﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ٣‬ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻳﻜﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﻛﻪ ً‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻼ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ۴‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺻﺪﺍ ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻨﯽ‪ ،‬ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻣﻀﺎ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 121
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻣﻬﺎ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[١‬‬ ‫• ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻳﻚ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻟﻐﺘﻨﺎﻣﻪ ‪T9‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﻴﺸﮕﻮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )‪T9Abc/‬‬ ‫‪(T9abc/T9ABC‬‬ ‫• ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ‪T9‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ‪ T9‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬ ‫ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺠﻢ ‪ ١۵K‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪ ١۵‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﯽ ﻛﺸﺪ‪ .
PAGE 122
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻣﻬﺎ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[١‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ‪T9‬‬ ‫‪ T9‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺘﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ‪ T9‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍی ﻟﻐﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻟﻐﺘﻨﺎﻣﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻟﻐﺘﻨﺎﻣﻪ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪T9‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎ‬ ‫‪ ١‬ﺑﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﻚ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 123
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻣﻬﺎ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[١‬‬ ‫‪ ٢‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻑ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ :‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺷﻴﻮﻩﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻣﯽﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬ ‫]ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ[ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺸﮕﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻮی ﻟﻐﺘﻨﺎﻣﻪ ‪ T9‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 124
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻣﻬﺎ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[١‬‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[١-٣‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﻣﯽﺭﺳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﮔﺎﻫﺘﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ‬ ‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻄﻠﻊ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی‬ ‫ﻫﺮ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 125
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻣﻬﺎ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[١‬‬ ‫ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻳﻚ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻔﺮﺳﺘﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺻﺪﺍ ﻭ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﯽﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﭘﻴﺎﻡﻫﺎی ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﻨﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ )ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻳﺎ(‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺯ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 126
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻣﻬﺎ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[١‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ‬ ‫]‬ ‫[ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫]‬ ‫[ ﻧﺎﻣﻮﻓﻖ‬ ‫]‬ ‫[ ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫]‬ ‫[ ‪ SMS‬ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺷﺪ‬ ‫* ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺟﺎﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻛﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡﻫﺎی ﺟﺎﺭی ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡﻫﺎی ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ‪ ،‬ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ )ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ(‪،‬‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﻳﺰ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ‪.
PAGE 127
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻣﻬﺎ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[١‬‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺶﻧﻮﻳﺲﻫﺎ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[١-۵‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﭘﻴﺶﻧﻮﻳﺲ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺶﻧﻮﻳﺲ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﯽ ﻛﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی ﺟﻬﺖﺩﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ‪ /‬ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ‬ ‫]‬ ‫[ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ‬ ‫]‬ ‫[ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ‬ ‫]‬ ‫[ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻫﺮ ﭘﻴﺶﻧﻮﻳﺲ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ]ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 128
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻣﻬﺎ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[١‬‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[١-۶‬‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺸﻨﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺗﯽ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[١-٧‬‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ‪ GSM‬ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﯽﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡﻫﺎ ﺣﺎﻭی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﭼﻮﻥ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵﻫﺎی ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺒﺎﺭ ﺗﺮﺍﻓﻴﻚ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﻛﺴﯽ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺭﻭﺧﺎﻧﻪﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺑﻬﺎی ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﺑﻬﺎﺩﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﯽﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺹ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 129
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻣﻬﺎ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[١‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﻫﺎ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[١-٨‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻦ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[١-٨-١‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ‪ ۶‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﻫﺎی ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﻫﺎی ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ‪ Empty‬ﺭﺍ ﭘﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[١-٨-٢‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪﺍﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻴﺶﻧﻮﻳﺲﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﮕﻮ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 130
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻣﻬﺎ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[١‬‬ ‫• ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬ ‫ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﻀﺎ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[١-٨-٣‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻣﻀﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﻜﺲ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[١-٩‬‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[١-٩-١‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﺻﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺠﻴﻨﮓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‪ERMES، X.400 ،‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺘﻀﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺎﻟﺒﻬﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 131
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻣﻬﺎ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[١‬‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[١-٩-٢‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻪ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ :‬ﻛﻢ‪ ،‬ﻋﺎﺩی ﻭ ﺑﺎﻻ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺪﺕ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡﻫﺎیﺗﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺁﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﭘﻴﺎﻡﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮﻓﻘﻴﺖ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪ :‬ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡﻫﺎ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.
PAGE 132
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻣﻬﺎ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[١‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[١-٩-٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽﻛﻨﺪ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺻﺪﺍی ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﯽﺭﺳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ١‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ٢‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﻓﺮﻋﯽ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎی ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺸﻨﻮﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 133
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻣﻬﺎ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[١-٩-۵‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻃﻮﺭی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‪.
PAGE 134
‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[٢‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[٢-١‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﻫﺎی ﺍﺧﻴﺮﺍ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﻫﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱﻫﺎی ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻩ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[٢-٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﻫﺎی ﺍﺧﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱﻫﺎی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[٢-٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﻫﺎی ﺍﺧﻴﺮﺍً ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ‪.
PAGE 135
‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[٢‬‬ ‫‪ ۵‬ﻣﻨﻮی ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ :‬ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻟﯽ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻠﯽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[٢-۵-٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﻬﺎی ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﻬﺎی ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺑﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ‪ PIN2‬ﻛﺪ )ﭘﻴﻦ ﻛﺪ( ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ[ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﺎ‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 136
‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[٢‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﺮ ﻣﺒﻨﺎی ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻗﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻬﺎی ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 137
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[٣‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ‪ ،‬ﺯﻧﮓﻫﺎی ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺤﻴﻂﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ[ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﯽﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺯﻧﮓ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺮﻭﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺷﻠﻮﻏﯽ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺮﻭﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺪﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺪﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﭘﺮﻭﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺪﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 138
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[٣‬‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﯽﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺮﻭﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‬ ‫• ﭘﺮﻭﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺪﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻨﺪﺯﻓﺮی ﻛﻴﺖ ﻳﺎ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﺪﺳﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽﻫﺎﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻥ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[٣ -x-١‬‬ ‫ﭘﺮﻭﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎی ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[٣ -x-٢‬‬ ‫ﻫﺮ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﻳﺒﺮﺍﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺯﻳﺮ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﯽﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 139
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[٣‬‬ ‫ﺯﻧﮓ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺻﺪﺍی ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻳﺎ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻭﻟﻮﻡ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺍﺑﮕﻮﻳﻲ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺪﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻫﻨﺪﺯﻓﺮﻱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺟﻮﺍﺑﮕﻮﻳﻲ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ ‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ ۵‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ‪ :‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ‪ ۵‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮﺩﺑﺨﻮﺩ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.
PAGE 140
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[۴‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍﺣﺘﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ[ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﻭﻗﺖ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[۴-١‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[۴-١-١‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺩﺍﺩﻩﻫﺎ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[۴-١-٢‬‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ‪DD/MM/YYYY، MM/DD/YYYY، YYYY/MM/DD‬‬ ‫)ﺳﺎﻝ‪ / Y:‬ﻣﺎﻩ‪ / M:‬ﺭﻭﺯ‪ (D:‬ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 141
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[۴‬‬ ‫• ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ‬ ‫ﻳﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺍﻧﻴﻤﻴﺸﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺧﻮﺷﺎﻣﺪ ﮔﻮﻳﯽ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[۴-٢-٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[۴-٢-٣‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻦﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ‪ On path mode‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺕ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[۴-٢-۴‬‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺕ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 142
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[۴‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[۴-٣‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻨﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ[ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻮی ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[۴-٣-١‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﺱﻫﺎی ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﺎﺱﻫﺎی ﻓﻜﺲ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺩﺍﺩﻩﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻛﻞ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦﻫﺎی ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦﻫﺎی ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽﻛﻪ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ‪.
PAGE 143
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[۴‬‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺮﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬‫ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽﺳﺎﺯﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺗﻤﺎﺱﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﺱﻫﺎی ﺗﻠﻔﻦﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﻭ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﻜﺲﻫﺎ ﻣﻴﺴﺮ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﯽﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‬ ‫‪ ۵‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﺧﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻟﻐﻮ‬‫ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽﺳﺎﺯﺩ‪..‬‬ ‫ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 144
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[۴‬‬ ‫ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[۴-٣-٣‬‬ ‫)ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻭ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺍﺳﺖ(‬ ‫• ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺗﯽ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 145
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[۴‬‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻣﺴﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[۴-٣-٧‬‬ ‫)ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ(‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱﻫﺎی ﺗﻠﻔﻨﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻖ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻛﻴﻦ ﮔﺮﻭﻩﻫﺎی ﺧﺎﺹ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﻭﺍﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﮔﺮﻭﻫﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱﻫﺎی ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ‪ CUG‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ‪ CUG‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬ ‫‪ :‬ﻧﺎﻡ ‪ CUG‬ﻭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ‪ CUG‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 146
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[۴‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[۴-۴-٢‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺟﺘﻨﺎﺏ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻛﺪ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﯽﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻨﻮی ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺘﯽ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻛﺪ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﺪ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩﺑﺨﻮﺩ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺯﻳﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦﺗﺎﻥ ﻛﺪ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[۴-۴-٣‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﻴﻜﻪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ‪ ١٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻟﻴﻜﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 147
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[۴‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻠﻔﻦﻫﺎی ﻭﺍﺭﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﻔﺮﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻭﻥ ﻣﺮﺯی‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻋﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦﻫﺎی ﻭﺍﺭﺩﻩ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﻔﺮﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻭﻥ ﻣﺮﺯی‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻐﻮ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻫﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻋﻴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻟﻐﻮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻫﺮ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻋﻴﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻋﻴﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻐﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻋﻴﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺴﺦ ﻣﯽﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱﻫﺎ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻉ ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻪ‪.
PAGE 148
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[۴‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﺪﻫﺎ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[۴-۴-۶‬‬ ‫‪) PIN‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ( ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﻤﺎﻧﻌﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻛﺪﻫﺎی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ PIN2 :‬ﻛﺪ ﻭ ﻛﺪ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺘﯽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ١‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺪ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺘﯽ‪/‬ﭘﻴﻦ‪ /‬ﭘﻴﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﺪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫]‪ [OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ٢‬ﻛﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺘﯽ‪ /‬ﭘﻴﻦ‪ /‬ﭘﻴﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﻛﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 149
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[۴‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪] GPRS‬ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[۴-۶‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ‪ GPRS‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[۴-۶-١‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﯽﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ‪ GPRS‬ﺛﺒﺖ ﻭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ‪ WAP‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺗﻠﻔﻨﯽ ‪ PC‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻭ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺑﻨﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ‬ ‫‪ GPRS‬ﺑﺎﻗﯽ ﻣﯽﻣﺎﻧﺪ‪.
PAGE 150
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ‪[۵‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺯﻧﮕﺪﺍﺭ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[۵-١‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎ ‪ ۵‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺯﻧﮓ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ١‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺯﻧﮓ ﺯﺩﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫‪ ٢‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺯﻧﮓ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﺜﻼ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺭ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺷﻨﺒﻪ ﺗﺎ ﺟﻤﻌﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺷﻨﺒﻪ ﺗﺎ ﺷﻨﺒﻪ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ ﺭﻭﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ٣‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ‬ ‫‪ ۴‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻭ‬ ‫]ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[۵-٢‬‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻛﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪ .
PAGE 151
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ‪[۵‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[۵-٢-١‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ‪ ٣٩‬ﺣﺮﻑ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ )‪ ٢١‬ﺣﺮﻑ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﭼﻴﻨﯽ( ﻭ ﺗﺎ ‪٢٠‬‬ ‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی ﻣﺠﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫‪ ١‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫]ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ[ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ٣‬ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[۵-٢-٢‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻭﺯﻫﺎی ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 152
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ‪[۵‬‬ ‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[۵-٣‬‬ ‫]ﻧﺎﻣﻬﺎ[ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪ ٢‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[۵-٣-١‬‬ ‫)ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ(‬ ‫]ﻧﺎﻣﻬﺎ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ١‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪ ٢‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪ ٣‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ۴‬ﺑﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻳﺎ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻣﻴﺴﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.
PAGE 153
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ‪[۵‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[۵-٣-٢‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﻫﺎی ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﮔﻨﺠﺎﻳﺶ ‪ ٢٠٠‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﮔﻨﺠﺎﻳﺶ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻫﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺗﺎ ‪ ٢۵‬ﺣﺮﻑ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ١‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫]ﺍﺳﻤﻬﺎ[ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ٢‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﻥ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 154
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ‪[۵‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻋﻀﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﻀﺎی ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﻋﻀﻮ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ ٢٠‬ﻋﻀﻮ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﻀﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻋﻀﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺍﻋﻀﺎی ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﯽ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻭی ﻫﻤﭽﻨﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺎﻗﯽ ﻣﯽﻣﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻧﺎﻣﮕﺬﺍﺭی ﻣﺠﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﻳﻚ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﮔﻴﺮی ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[۵-٣-۴‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﯽ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺟﻬﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﮔﻴﺮی ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ‪ ٣-٢‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً‬ ‫ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 155
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ‪[۵‬‬ ‫ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬‫• ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫]ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﭘﺮﺳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ‬‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻳﺎ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻳﺎ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬‫• ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫]ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬ ‫‪ :‬ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻮﺭی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ‬ ‫ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺳﻢ‬‫ﺩﻫﺪ‪.
PAGE 156
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ‪[۵‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻫﻤﻪ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[۵-٣-٧‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎی ﻭﺭﻭﺩیﻫﺎی ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻛﺪ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺘﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﻧﺎﻣﻬﺎ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻭی ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬ ‫‪ ١‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺎک ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 157
‫‪ FM‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[۶‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﻟﺬﺕ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﻓﻮﺭی ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ )‬ ‫( ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ]ﻣﻨﻮی ‪[۶-١‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ‪ ،‬ﻫﺪﺳﺖ ‪ FM‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻴﺶ ﻫﺪﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫( ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﻓﻮﺭی ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ )‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 158
‫‪ FM‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[۶‬‬ ‫‪ ٢‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﯽ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺧﻴﺮﺍً ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺍی ﻛﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﻴﺎﻡ “ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪ” ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺭﻧﮕﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪ :‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ‪ ١٠‬ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ٣‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ )ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ( ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ۴‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﭼﭗ ]ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ[ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.
PAGE 159
‫‪ FM‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[۶‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮی “ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ” ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎی ﻣﻨﻮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﻫﻢ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﯽ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‬ ‫• ﻭﻗﺘﻴﻜﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺻﺪﺍی ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍً ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﻜﻪ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻨﻮﻳﺪ ﻭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﯽ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.
PAGE 160
‫ﺑﺎﺯی ﻭ ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣﯽ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[٧‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﺪﻩ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[٧-١‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﺎ ‪ ٩‬ﻣﻨﻮ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻮﺭی‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺛﺒﺖ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﺪﻩ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ )ﺧﺎﻟﯽ( ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪ :‬ﻣﻨﻮی ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽﺳﺎﺯﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪ :‬ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬‫‪ :‬ﻣﻨﻮی ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﯽﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺣﺬﻑ‬‫ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻫﻤﻪ ‪ :‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﯽﻛﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 161
‫ﺑﺎﺯی ﻭ ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣﯽ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[٧‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[٧-٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ‪ ۴‬ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻣﯽﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ : ÷ ،x ،- ،+‬ﺟﻤﻊ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻖ‪ ،‬ﺿﺮﺏ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ‘ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی ﻋﺪﺩی ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ٢‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ٣‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ[ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ۴‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬ ‫‪ ۵‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ )ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ( ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 162
‫ﺑﺎﺯی ﻭ ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣﯽ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[٧‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﻫﺮ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺬﻑ ﻫﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺪﻝ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[٧-۵‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ‪ :‬ﻃﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺯﻥ ﻭ ﺣﺠﻢ‬ ‫]ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎ[ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﻜﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ١‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫‪ ٢‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺯﺵ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﺭﺯﺵ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﺍﺣﺪی ﻛﻪ ﻣﯽﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 163
‫ﺑﺎﺯی ﻭ ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣﯽ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[٧‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[٧-٧-٢‬‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[٧-٨‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﻭ ﻫﺮ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﭼﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﺍﻳﺴﺖ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺳﯽ ﺩی ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 164
‫ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ‪[٨‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﭘﺮﻭﺗﻜﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩی ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ )‪ (WAP‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺴﯽ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺷﺒﻜﻪﺗﺎﻥ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﻣﺜﻞ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺒﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵﻫﺎی ﻫﻮﺍ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﺮﻭﺍﺯﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[٨-١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻳﺘﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺮﻭﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .
PAGE 165
‫ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ‪[٨‬‬ ‫ﭘﺮﻭﻓﺎﻳﻞ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[٨-٣‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ‪ ۵‬ﭘﺮﻭﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﻜﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻭﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﺪﻩ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫• ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﭘﺮﻭﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪ WAP‬ﭘﺮﻭﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ‬‫ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ‬‫ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﭘﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﯽﺁﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ‪ /‬ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 166
‫ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ‪[٨‬‬ ‫ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪GPRS‬‬‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻛﻪ )‪ (GPRS‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ‬ ‫ﻣﯽﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺁﺩﺭﺱ )‪ (IP‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﺍﺯﻩ ‪ WAP‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ‪IP‬‬ ‫‪ (APN) :‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ‪ GPRS‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪APN‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺷﻨﺎﺳﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺳﺮﻭﺭ ‪APN‬‬ ‫ﺷﻨﺎﺳﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬ ‫‪ :‬ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ‬ ‫ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ‬‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻣﯽﺭﻭﺩ‪.
PAGE 167
‫ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ‪[٨‬‬ ‫ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ‪] URL‬ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[٨-۴‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﻳﺘﯽ ﻛﻪ ﻣﯽﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺘﯽ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[٨-۵‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[٨-۵-١‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[٨-۵-٢‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻳﺎ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 168
‫ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ‪[٨‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[٨-٨‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﻛﺎﻭﺷﮕﺮ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[٨-٩‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﻛﺎﻭﺷﮕﺮ ‪ WAP‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 169
‫ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪ [٨-١‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫• ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻣﺠﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺣﺎﺿﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻬﺎ‬ ‫]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪ [٨-٢‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﻚ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺘﯽ ﻋﻼﻣﺖﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻣﯽﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ‪URL‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑﺘﺎﻥ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ‪ ،‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻣﯽﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 170
‫ﺟﺎﻭﺍ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[٩‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩی ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[٩-١‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺟﺎﻭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ١‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪ ٢‬ﺟﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ‪ :‬ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ‪ MIDP‬ﺟﺎﻭﺍ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ٣‬ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ‪ MIDIet‬ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ۴‬ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬ ‫‪ MIDIet :‬ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻣﯽﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ۵‬ﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫‪ ۶‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻭﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ‪ MIDIet‬ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 171
‫ﺟﺎﻭﺍ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ‪[٨‬‬ ‫ﭘﺮﻭﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎ ]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪[٩-٣‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﻀﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻫﺎی ﺟﺎﻭﺍ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺷﺒﻜﻪﺍی ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺯیﻫﺎی ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﻔﺮﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻫﺎ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ‬ ‫‪ ۵‬ﭘﺮﻭﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺮﻭﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺯﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﺒﻴﻪ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﭘﺮﻭﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎی ‪ wap‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﻛﻪ ﻣﯽﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﭘﺮﻭﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎی ‪ wap‬ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ JAVA TM‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ‪ Java‬ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.
PAGE 172
‫ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩی ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻫﺎی ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی‬ ‫ﻫﺪﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻬﻴﺎ ﻣﯽﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺳﻴﺎﺭ )ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ(‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﻛﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺰﻝ‬ ‫ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ‪CD /‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ،‬ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 173
‫ﻋﻴﺐ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺗﯽ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺑﻨﺪی ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻔﻨﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﯽ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺗﯽ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﺣﺘﯽ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺎی ‪SIM‬‬ ‫ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻫﺎﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ‪SIM‬‬ ‫ﻫﻴﭻ ‪ SIM‬ﻛﺎﺭﺗﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎی‬ ‫ﺷﺎﻳﺪ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.
PAGE 174
‫ﻋﻴﺐ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬ ‫ﻛﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﻛﺜﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺎی ﺷﺎﺭژ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﻛﺎﻣﻼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺩﻣﺎ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﻭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 175
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﯽ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ‪B2000 :‬‬ ‫‪GSM 900 / DCS 1800 / PCS 1900 :‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ‬ ‫‪ +55 :‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪ -10 :‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪ B2000‬ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪87‬‬
PAGE 176
ENGLISH GPRS & MMS Phone USER’S MANUAL MODEL: B2000 Please read this manual carefully before operating your mobile phone. Retain it for future reference.
PAGE 177
Introduction Congratulations on your purchase of the advanced and compact B2000 cellular phone, designed to operate with the latest digital mobile communication technology. This user’s guide contains important information on the use and operation of this phone. Please read all the information carefully for optimal performance and to prevent any damage or misuse of the phone. Any changes or modifications not expressively approved in this user’s guide could void your warranty for this equipment.
PAGE 178
Guidelines for safe and efficient use Read these simple guidelines. Breaking the rules may be dangerous or illegal. Further detailed information is given in this manual. Exposure to radio frequency energy Radio wave exposure and Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) information This mobile phone model B2000 has been designed to comply with applicable safety requirement for exposure to radio waves.
PAGE 179
Guidelines for safe and efficient use Product care and maintenance Warning: Use only batteries, charger and accessories approved for use with this particular phone model. The use of any other types may invalidate any approval or warranty applying to the phone, and may be dangerous. • Do not disassemble this unit. (Take it to a qualified service technician when repair work is required.) • Keep away from electrical appliances such as a TV, radio or personal computer.
PAGE 180
Guidelines for Safe and Efficient Use Efficient phone operation To enjoy optimum performance with minimum power consumption please: • Hold the phone upright as you speak to any other telephone. While speaking directly into the microphone, angle the antenna in a direction up and over your shoulder. • If your mobile phone supports infrared, never direct the infrared ray at anyone’s eye. Electronic devices All wireless phones may get interference, which could affect performance.
PAGE 181
Guidelines for safe and efficient use Road safety Check the laws and regulations on the use of mobile phones in the areas when you drive. • Do not use a hand-held phone while driving. • Give full attention to driving. • Use a handsfree kit, if available. • Pull off the road and park before making and answering a call if driving conditions so require. • RF energy may affect some electonic system in your motor vehicle such as car stereo, safety equipment.
PAGE 182
Guidelines for Safe and Efficient Use Children Keep the phone in a safe place out of children’s reach. It includes small parts which if detached may cause a choking hazard. Emergency calls Emergency call may not be available under all cellular networks. Therefore, you should never depend solely on the phone for emergency calls. Check with your local service provider. Battery information and care • You do not need to completely discharge the battery before recharging.
PAGE 183
B2000 User Guide C o n t e n t s Overview Parts of the Phone .................................................................. 12 • Front view ............................................................................................. 12 • Rear view ............................................................................................. 13 Key Description ....................................................................... 14 • Keypad Description ........................................
PAGE 184
• Making a call using the Phonebook ...................................................... 22 Additional Functions In call Menu ............................................................................. 23 • During a call .......................................................................................... 23 • Multiparty or Conference Calls ............................................................. 25 Access Codes .........................................................................
PAGE 185
B2000 User Guide C o n t e n t s Profiles [Menu 3] ..................................................................... 53 • Activate [Menu 3-x-1]] ........................................................................... 54 • Personalise [Menu 3-x-2] ...................................................................... 54 • Rename [Menu 3-x-3] ............................................................................ 55 Settings [Menu 4] .....................................................
PAGE 186
Fun & Tools [Menu 7] ............................................................. 78 • Favorites [Menu 7-1] ............................................................................. 78 • Games [Menu 7-2] ................................................................................ 78 • Calculator [Menu 7-3] ........................................................................... 79 • My folder [Menu 7-4] .............................................................................
PAGE 187
Parts of the Phone Front view Earpiece Headset jack Display Screen Favorites key Message key Soft Left key Soft Right key Radio hot key End/Power key Send key Clear/Cancel key Phone book list key Numeric keys Hash key Star key Microphone B2000 User Guide 12
PAGE 188
Parts of the Phone Rear view Handstrap Hole SIM Card Socket Battery Terminals Battery cover Battery B2000 User Guide 13 Cable Connector/ Battery Charging Connector/ Hands-Free Car kit Connector
PAGE 189
Key Description The following shows key components of the phone. Keypad Description Key Description Soft Left Key / Soft Right Key Each of these keys performs the function indicated by the text on the display immediately above it. Navigation Keys Use to scroll through menus and move the cursor. You can also use these keys for quick access to the following functions. • Up navigation key ( Favorites menu. ) : A shortcut key to the • Down navigation key ( Phonebook. • Left navigation key ( Radio.
PAGE 190
Key Description ~ Key Description Numeric Keys These keys are used mainly to dial in standby mode and enter numbers or characters in editing mode. When you press these keys for a long time. • Used to call your voicemail box by • Used to call for international call by • Used to call Speed dials by from . . to . END/PWR Key Used to end or reject a call. This key is also used as Power Key by pressing this key for a few seconds. You can delete the characters, go back to the menu.
PAGE 191
Key Description Letter Keys Each key can be used for several symbols. These are shown below. Key Description .
PAGE 192
Display Information The screen displays several icons. These are described below. On-Screen Icons Icon/Indicator Description Tells you the strength of the network signal. Call is connected. You can use GPRS service. Shows that you are using a roaming service. The alarm has been set and is on. Tells you the status of the battery. You have received a text message. You have received a voice message. You have received a push message. You can view your schedule. All audible signals are turned off.
PAGE 193
Installation 1. Inserting the SIM Card Locate the SIM card socket in the back of the phone. Follow the steps below to install the SIM card. 1. Remove the battery if attached. 2. Slide the SIM card into the slot, under the silvery holders, with the golden connectors facing down. 2. Removing the SIM Card Follow the steps below to Remove the SIM card. 1. Remove the battery if attached. 2. Take out the SIM card from the slot.
PAGE 194
Installation 3. Installing the Battery 1. Position the lugs on the bottom of the battery into the retaining holder. 2. Then push to the half of the battery into position. 3. Lay the battery cover in place of the phone and slide it until the latch clicks.
PAGE 195
Installation 4. Charging the Battery To connect the travel adapter to the phone, you must have installed the battery. 1. With the arrow facing you as shown in the diagram push the plug on the battery adapter into the socket on the bottom of the phone until it clicks into place. 2. Connect the other end of the travel adapter to the mains socket. Use only the included packing charger. Warning • Do not force the connector as this may damage the phone and/or the travel adapter.
PAGE 196
Installation 5. Disconnecting the charger Disconnect the travel adapter from the phone by pressing its side buttons as shown in the diagram. Note • Ensure the battery is fully charged before using the phone. • Do not remove your battery or the SIM card while charging. • The moving bars of battery icon will stop after charging is complete. Note If the battery does not charge, • switch the phone off. • ensure the battery is correctly fit.
PAGE 197
Making and Answering Calls Making a call 1. Key in phone number including the area code. If you want to delete number, press . 2. Press to call the number. 3. Press to end the call. International Calls 1. Press and hold the key for the international prefix. “+” character may replace with the international access code. 2. Enter the country code, area code, and the phone number. 3. Press . Making a call using the Phonebook 1. In standby mode, press [Names]. 2.
PAGE 198
In call Menu The menu displayed on the handset screen during a call is different to the default main menu reached from the idle screen, and the options are described here. 1 During a call 1-1 Putting a Call on Hold When a call is made or answered, press the [Send] to place it on hold. When a call is held, press the [Send] to make it active. 1-2 Making a Second Call You can get a dial number from phonebook to make a second call. Press [Names] then select Search.
PAGE 199
In call Menu 1-4 Answering an Incoming Call To answer an incoming call when the handset is ringing, simply press the [Send] key. The handset is also able to warn you of an incoming call while you are already in a call. A tone sounds in the earpiece, and the display will show that a second call is waiting. This feature, known as Call Waiting, is only available if your network supports it. For details of how to activate and deactivate it see Call waiting [Menu 4-3-4].
PAGE 200
In call Menu 1-7 Switching DTMF Tones on During a Call To turn DTMF tones on during a call, for example, to allow your handset to make use of an automated switchboard, select [Options], then DTMF On. DTMF tones can be turned off the same way. 1-8 Calling up Messages and SIM Tool Kit main menu The Messages and SIM Tool kit main menu options can be reached from the in-call menu by selecting [Options]. SIM Tool Kit menu is shown only when SIM in the handset supports SIM Tool Kit service.
PAGE 201
In call Menu 2-1 Making a Second Call You can make a second call while you are already in a call. To do this, enter the second number and press [Send]. When you get second call the first call is automatically put on hold. You can swap between calls by selecting [Options] then Swap. 2-2 Setting up a Multiparty Call You can connect a call on hold to the currently active call to form a multiparty call by selecting [Options] then Multiparty / Join all.
PAGE 202
In call Menu 2-7 Putting a Member of a Multiparty Call on Hold To place one selected caller (whose number is currently displayed on-screen) of a multiparty call on hold, select [Options] then Multiparty / Exclude. 2-8 A Private Call in a Multiparty Call To have a private call with one caller of a multiparty call, display the number of the caller you wish to talk to on the screen, then select [Options] and Multiparty / Private to put all the other callers on hold.
PAGE 203
Access Codes You can use the access codes described in this section to avoid unauthorized use of your phone. The access codes (except PUK and PUK2 codes) can be changed by using [Menu 4-4-6]. PIN code (4 to 8 digits) The PIN (Personal Identification Number) code protects your SIM card against unauthorized use. The PIN code is usually supplied with the SIM card. When PIN code is set On, your phone will request the PIN code every time it is switched on.
PAGE 204
Menu Tree 1 Messages 3 Profiles 1 Write text message 2 Write multimedia message 3 Inbox 4 Outbox 5 Drafts 6 Listen to voice mail 7 Info message 8 Templates 9 Settings 1 Vibrate only 2 Quiet 3 General 4 Loud 5 Headset 6 Car 4 Settings 1 Date & Time 2 Phone settings 3 Call settings 4 Security settings 5 Network settings 6 GPRS setting 7 Reset settings 2 Call register 1 Missed calls 2 Received calls 3 Dialled calls 4 Delete recent calls 5 Call charges 6 GPRS information 5 Organiser 1 Alarm clock 2 Sched
PAGE 205
Menu Tree 6 FM Radio 8 Internet 1 Listen radio 1 Home 2 Channels 2 Bookmarks 3 Profiles 4 Go to URL 5 Cache settings 7 Fun & Tools 6 Cookies settings 1 Favorites 7 Security certification 2 Games 8 Reset profiles 3 Calculator 9 Browser version 4 My folder 5 Unit converter 6 World time 7 Voice recorder 8 Memory status 9 Java 1 Applications 2 Download 3 Profiles 10 SIM Service This menu depends on SIM and the network services.
PAGE 206
Messages [Menu 1] This menu includes functions related to SMS (Short Message Service), MMS (Multimedia Message Service), voice mail, as well as the network’s service messages. Write text message [Menu 1-1] You can write and edit text message, checking the number of message pages. 1. Enter the Messages menu by pressing [Select]. 2. If you want to write a new message, select Write text message. 3. To make text input easier, use T9. For details, see How to Use T9 (Page 36). 4.
PAGE 207
Messages [Menu 1] • Save Saves the message. • Font You can select Size and Style of fonts. • Colour You can select Colour of foreground and background. • Alignment You can make the message contents aligned Right, Centre or Left. • Add T9 dictionary You can add your own word. This menu can be shown only when edit mode is Predictive (T9Abc/T9abc/T9ABC). • T9 languages Select a T9 input mode. • Exit If you press Exit while writing a message, you can end the writing message and back to the Message menu.
PAGE 208
Messages [Menu 1] Insert • Symbol You can add special characters. • Picture You can insert the Default pictures or pictures in My folder that are available for short messages. • Sound You can insert sounds that are available for short messages. • Text templates You can use Text templates already set in the phone. • Phonebook You can add phone numbers or e-mail addresses in Phonebook. • Signature You can add your contact information to the message.
PAGE 209
Messages [Menu 1] Options • Send You can send multimedia messages to multiple recipients, prioritise your message, and make it sent later as well. • Preview You can preview multimedia messages you wrote. • Save You can save multimedia messages in the drafts or as templates. • Add slide You can add a slide before or after current slide. • Move to slide You can move to previous or next slide. • Delete slide You can delete current slides.
PAGE 210
Messages [Menu 1] • Add T9 dictionary You can add your own word. This menu can be shown only when edit mode is Predictive (T9Abc/T9abc/T9ABC). • T9 languages Select a T9 input mode. • Exit You can back to the Message menu. Note • If you select the picture (15K) on writing multimedia message, loading duration will take around 15 seconds at least. Furthermore, you can't activate any key during loading time. After 15 seconds, it is available to write multimedia message.
PAGE 211
Messages [Menu 1] How to Use T9 T9 allows you to input text quickly. In T9, you only need to press the key with the corresponding letter once. This is based on a built-in dictionary to which you can also add new words. • Writing words by using T9. 1. Start writing a word by using the keys to Press each key only once for one letter. To write for instance ‘Girl’, press , , The characters that you enter appear blocked. (For G) (For r) . , . (For i) (For l) The word changes after each keystroke.
PAGE 212
Messages [Menu 1] Alternatively : Press key and select insert symbols. Select the desired character and press Select. 2. When you have finished writing a word, check whether the word is correct. If the word is correct : Press and write the next word. If the word is not correct : Search by , (Previous and Next word). Alternatively : If there is no word you want you can add your own word. Press [Options] in the Predictive edit mode. Select Add T9 dictionary Menu. You can see the following.
PAGE 213
Messages [Menu 1] Inbox [Menu 1-3] You will be alerted when you have received messages. They will be stored in Inbox. In Inbox, you can identify each message by icons. For detail, see the icon directive. Icon directive [ ] Multimedia message [ ] Short message [ ] SIM message [ ] Read [ ] Notified multimedia message If the phone shows ‘No space for SIM message’, you have to delete only SIM messages from Inbox.
PAGE 214
Messages [Menu 1] Forward You can forward the selected message to another party. Return call You can call back to the sender. Delete You can delete the current message. Extract You can extract picture, sound and text. They will be saved in My folder or Phonebook. View information You can view information about received messages; Sender's address, Subject (only for Multimedia message), Message date & time, Message type, Message size.
PAGE 215
Messages [Menu 1] Icon directive [ ] Sent [ ] Failed [ ] Delivery confirmed [ ] SMS sent When you already sent the message: Forward You can forward the current message to other recipients. Delete You can delete the current message. View information You can view information about outbox messages; Recipient’s address, Subject (only for Multimedia message), Message date & time, Message type, Message size. When you didn’t send the message: View You can view the messaage. Send You can send the message.
PAGE 216
Messages [Menu 1] Drafts [Menu 1-5] You can view the messages saved as a draft. The draft messages are listed with the date and time when they were saved. Scroll through the list using up/down navigation keys. Icon directive [ ] Multimedia message [ ] Text message [ ] Delivery confirmed Each draft has the following options. Press [Options]. View You can view the selected message. Edit You can edit the selected message. Send You can send the selected message.
PAGE 217
Messages [Menu 1] Delete all Deletes all the messages from drafts folder. Listen to voice mail [Menu 1-6] You can listen to voice mail. Info message [Menu 1-7] Info service messages are text messages delivered by the network to GSM. They provide general information such as weather reports, traffic news, taxis, pharmacies, and stock prices. Each type of information has the number; therefore, you can contact service provider as long as you have input the certain number for the information.
PAGE 218
Messages [Menu 1] • Active list You can select Info service message numbers in the active list. If you activate an info service number, you can receive messages sent from the number. Templates [Menu 1-8] Text templates [Menu 1-8-1] You have 6 text templates. You can change the predefined templates into your favorite ones or fill the s. Multimedia templates [Menu 1-8-2] You can use the following options. • Preview You can preview multimedia messages you wrote.
PAGE 219
Messages [Menu 1] • Remove media You can remove pictures or sounds in the slide. This option can be shown only when any media exists. • Add T9 dictionary You can add your own word. This menu can be shown only when edit mode is Predictive (T9Abc/T9abc/T9ABC). • T9 languages Select a T9 input mode. • Exit You can back to the Message menu. Signature [Menu 1-8-3] You can make your Signature. Key in Name, Phone number, Fax number and Email.
PAGE 220
Messages [Menu 1] • Reply via same service centre When a message is sent, it allows the recipients to reply and charge the cost of the reply to your telephone bill. • SMS centre If you want to send the text message, you can receive the address of SMS centre through this menu. Multimedia message [Menu 1-9-2] • Priority You can send the message after setting the level of priority: Low, Normal and High.
PAGE 221
Messages [Menu 1] - Homepage This menu allows to connect MMS centre (MMSC). - Bearer • Data • GPRS - Data settings Appears only if you select Data settings as a Bearer\service. IP address Dial number : Enter the telephone number to dial to access your WAP gateway. User ID Password Call type : Select the type of data call, Analogue or Digital (ISDN). Call speed : The speed of your data connection 9600 or 14400. - GPRS settings The service settings are only available when GPRS is chosen as a bearer service.
PAGE 222
Messages [Menu 1] • Permitted types Personal : Personal message. Advertisements : Commercial message. Information : Necessary information. Voice mail centre [Menu 1-9-3] You can receive the voicemail if this feature is supported by your network service provider. When a new voicemail is arrived, the symbol will be displayed on the screen. Please check with your network service provider for details of their service in order to configure the phone accordingly. 1. Hold down key in standby mode. 2.
PAGE 223
Messages [Menu 1] • Alert - Yes Your phone will beep when you have received Info service message numbers. - No Your phone will not beep even though you have received info service messages. • Languages You can select the language you want by pressing [On/Off]. Then, the info service message will be shown in the language that you selected. Push messages [Menu 1-9-5] You can set the option whether you will receive the message or not.
PAGE 224
Call register [Menu 2] Missed calls [Menu 2-1] This menu shows recently missed numbers. You can call these numbers, save and view the date and the time. Received calls [Menu 2-2] This menu shows recently received numbers. You can call these numbers, save and view the date and the time. Dialled calls [Menu 2-3] This menu shows the latest dialled numbers up to 20. Delete recent calls [Menu 2-4] You can delete recent calls of Missed calls, Received calls, Dialled calls or All calls.
PAGE 225
Call register [Menu 2] Call duration [Menu 2-5-1] This function allows you to view the duration of your Last Call, All Calls, Received calls and Dialled calls in hours, minutes and seconds. You can also reset the call timers. 1. Press [Menu] in standby mode. 2. Press for direct access or use register, then select Call charges. and to enter Call 3. Scroll to highlight Call duration and Press [Select]. The following 5 submenus: Last call, All calls, Received calls, Dialled calls and Reset all.
PAGE 226
Call register [Menu 2] Settings [Menu 2-5-3] (SIM Dependent) • Set tariff You can set the currency type and the unit price. Contact your service providers to obtain charging unit prices. To select the currency or unit in this menu, you need the PIN2 code. Note • When all units have been used, no calls can be made except emergency calls. Depending on the SIM card, you need the PIN2 code to set a call cost limit.
PAGE 227
Call register [Menu 2] GPRS information [Menu 2-6] You can check the amount of data transferred over the network through GPRS. In addition, you can view how much time you are online. Call duration [Menu 2-6-1] You can check the duration of Last call and All calls. You can also reset the call timers. Data volumes [Menu 2-6-2] You can check the Sent, Received or All data volumes and Reset all.
PAGE 228
Profiles [Menu 3] In this menu, you can adjust and customize the phone tones for different events and environments. 1. Press [Menu] in standby mode. 2. Press for direct access or use and . Vibrate only You can adjust the profile as Vibrate only if you need vibration mode. In the mode, all kinds of alert are Vibrate or Silent. Quiet You can adjust the profile as Quiet if you are in quiet place. General You can adjust the profile as General.
PAGE 229
Profiles [Menu 3] Note • Headset and Car profiles can be activated only when Handsfree kit or Ear microphone put on the handset. However, their properties can be personalised. Activate [Menu 3-x-1] Activates the selected Profile. Personalise [Menu 3-x-2] Each has the submenus as shown below except for Vibrate only. Call alert type Allows to select alert type such as Ring, Vibrate, etc. for the incoming for adjusting environment. Ring tone Allows to set the ring tone for adjusting environment.
PAGE 230
Profiles [Menu 3] Keypad tone Allows to select the keypad tone for adjusting environment. Effect sound volume Allows to set the effect sound volume for adjusting environment. Power on/off volume Allows to set the power on/off volume for adjusting environment Auto answer This function will be activated only when your phone is connected to the headset or handsfree kit. • Off : The phone will not answer automatically. • After 5 secs : After 5 seconds, the phone will answer automatically.
PAGE 231
Settings [Menu 4] You can set the following menus for your convenience and preferences. 1. Press 2. Press [Menu] in standby mode. for direct access to enter Settings. Date & Time [Menu 4-1] You can set functions relating to the date and time. Set date [Menu 4-1-1] You can enter the current date. Date format [Menu 4-1-2] You can set the Date format such as DD/MM/YYYY, MM/DD/YYYY, YYYY/MM/DD. (D: Day / M: Month / Y: Year) Set time [Menu 4-1-3] You can enter the current time.
PAGE 232
Settings [Menu 4] • Myfolder You can select a picture or an animation as wallpaper. Greeting note [Menu 4-2-2] If you select On, you can edit the text which is displayed in standby mode. Language [Menu 4-2-3] You can change the language for the display texts in your phone. This change will also affect the Language Input mode. Backlight [Menu 4-2-4] You can set the light-up duration of the LCD display. LCD contrast [Menu 4-2-5] You can set the brightness of LCD by pressing , .
PAGE 233
Settings [Menu 4] Call settings [Menu 4-3] You can set the menu relevant to a call by pressing the Setting menu. [Select] in Call divert [Menu 4-3-1] The Call divert service allows you to divert incoming voice calls, fax calls, and data calls to another number. For details, contact your service provider. • All voice calls Diverts voice calls unconditionally. • If busy Diverts voice calls when the phone is in use. • If no reply Diverts voice calls which you do not answer.
PAGE 234
Settings [Menu 4] The submenus Call divert menus have the submenus shown below. - Activate Activate the corresponding service. To voice mail centre Forwards to message centre. This function is not shown at All data calls and All fax calls menus. To other number Inputs the number for diverting. To favourite number You can check recent 5 diverted numbers. - Cancel Deactivate the corresponding service. - View status View the status of the corresponding service.
PAGE 235
Settings [Menu 4] Send my number [Menu 4-3-3] (network and subscription dependent) • On You can send your phone number to another party. Your phone number will be shown on the receiver’s phone. • Off Your phone number will not be shown. • Set by network Select this to reset the phone to the setting that you have agreed upon with your service provider. Call waiting [Menu 4-3-4] (network dependent) • Activate If you select Activate, you can accept a waiting (receiving) call.
PAGE 236
Settings [Menu 4] Auto redial [Menu 4-3-6] • On When this function is activated, the phone will automatically try to redial in the case of failure to connect a call. • Off Your phone will not make any attempts to redial when the original call has not connected. Closed user group [Menu 4-3-7] (network dependent) Restricts usage of the phone with numbers that belong to certain user groups. When this function is used, every outgoing call is associated with a group index.
PAGE 237
Settings [Menu 4] Security settings [Menu 4-4] PIN code request [Menu 4-4-1] In this menu, you can set the phone to ask for the PIN code of your SIM card when the phone is switched on. If this function is activated, you’ll be requested to enter the PIN code. 1. Select PIN code request in the security settings menu, and then press [Select]. 2. Set On/Off. 3. If you want to change the setting, you need to enter PIN code when you switch on the phone. 4.
PAGE 238
Settings [Menu 4] Note • If you want to lock your phone keypad manually, enter Top menu and press key. • If you want to unlock your phone keypad, press [unlock] key and then press key. But if you enabled Automatic key lock before, your phone keypad will be unlock and then after 10 seconds the keypad will be lock up again automatically. Call barring [Menu 4-4-4] The Call barring service prevents your phone from making or receiving certain category of calls. This function requires the call barring password.
PAGE 239
Settings [Menu 4] Each call barring menu has following submenus: • Activate Allows to request the network to set call restriction on. • Cancel Set the selected call restriction off. • View status View the status whether the calls are barred or not. Fixed dial number [Menu 4-4-5] (SIM dependent) You can restrict your outgoing calls to selected phone numbers. The numbers are protected by your PIN2 code. • Activate You can restrict your outgoing calls to selected phone numbers.
PAGE 240
Settings [Menu 4] Network settings [Menu 4-5] You can select a network which will be registered either automatically or manually. Usually, the network selection is set to Automatic. Automatic [Menu 4-5-1] If you select Automatic mode, the phone will automatically search for and select a network for you. Once you have selected “Automatic”, the phone will be set to “Automatic” even though the power is off and on. Manual [Menu 4-5-2] The phone will find the list of available networks and show you them.
PAGE 241
Settings [Menu 4] GPRS setting [Menu 4-6] You can set GPRS service depending on various situation. Power on [Menu 4-6-1] If you select this menu, the phone is automatically registered to a GPRS network when you switch the phone on. Starting a WAP or PC dial-up application created the connection between phone and network and data transfer is possible. When you end the application, GPRS connection is ended but the registration to the GPRS network remains.
PAGE 242
Organiser [Menu 5] Alarm clock [Menu 5-1] You can set up to 5 alarm clocks to go off at a specified time. 1. Select On and enter the alarm time you want. 2. Select the repeat period : Once, Mon~Fri, Mon~Sat, Everyday. 3. Select the alarm tone you want and press 4. Edit the alarm name and press [OK]. [OK]. Scheduler [Menu 5-2] When you enter this menu a Calendar will show up. On top of the screen there are sections for date. Also on bottom of the screen there are sections for icons (schedule, memo).
PAGE 243
Organiser [Menu 5] Add new [Menu 5-2-1] You can edit maximum 39 characters and take up to 20 notes. • Schedule Input the subject, the schedule time, the repeat, the alarm by pressing allowed keys. • Memo 1. Select Add new by pressing [Select]. 2. Press Memo. 3. Input the memo and then press [OK]. View [Menu 5-2-2] Shows the note for the chosen day. Use , to browse through the note lists. If you set alarm for the note, Alarm watch is displayed.
PAGE 244
Organiser [Menu 5] Phonebook [Menu 5-3] 1. To use Phonebook, press [Names] in standby mode. 2. To use Phonebook, press select Organiser. [Menu] in standby mode and Search [Menu 5-3-1] (Calling from phonebook) 1. In standby mode, press 2. Search by pressing [Names]. [Select]. 3. Enter the name whose phone numbers or e-mail address you want to search or Select ‘List’ to view phonebook. 4. Instant searching is available by inputting the initial letter of the name or number you want to search. 5.
PAGE 245
Organiser [Menu 5] Add new [Menu 5-3-2] You can add phonebook entry by using this function. Phone memory capacity is 200 entries. SIM card memory capacity depends on the cellular service provider. You can also save 25 characters of name in The Phone memory, and save characters in the SIM card. The number of character is SIM dependent feature. 1. Open the phonebook first by pressing mode. [Names] in standby 2. Scroll to highlight Add new, and press [Select]. 3.
PAGE 246
Organiser [Menu 5] • Group ring tone Allows you to specify ring tone for the group members' call. • Group icon Allows you to select the icon dependent on Group. • Add member You can add group members. Each group member should not exceed 20. • Remove member You can remove the member from the Group member list. But the name and the number still remain in phonebook. • Rename You can change a group name. Speed dial [Menu 5-3-4] You can assign any of the keys, to with a Name list entry.
PAGE 247
Organiser [Menu 5] Settings [Menu 5-3-5] 1. Press [Names] in standby mode. 2. Scroll to Settings, then press [Select]. • Set memory Scroll to highlight Set memory, then press [Select]. - If you select Variable, when adding entry, the phone will ask where to store. - If you select SIM or Phone, the phone will store an entry to SIM or phone. • Search by Scroll to highlight Search by, then press [Select]. - If you select Variable, the phone will ask how to search.
PAGE 248
Organiser [Menu 5] 2. Scroll to Copy all, then press [Select] to enter this menu. • SIM to Phone : You can copy the entry from SIM Card to Phone memory. • Phone to SIM : You can copy the entry from Phone memory to SIM Card. 3. You can see the following submenus. • Keep original : When copying, Original Dial Number is kept. • Delete original : When copying, Original Dial Number will be erased. Calendar setting [Menu 5-4] Select which calendar will be used from A.D., Hijriyya, and Farsi.
PAGE 249
Organiser [Menu 5] Delete all [Menu 5-3-7] You can delete all entries in SIM, Phone, and Voice. This function requires Security code except for voice. 1. Press [Names] in standby mode and select Delete all, press [Select]. 2. Then select a memory to erase. 3. Enter security code and Press [OK] or [Back]. Information [Menu 5-3-8] • Service dial number Use this function to access a particular list of services provided by your network operator (if supported by the SIM card). 1.
PAGE 250
FM Radio [Menu 6] You can search radio stations and enjoy listening to the radio. In standby mode, pressing the Radio hot key ( menu. ) accesses this Listen radio [Menu 6-1] Connect the FM Radio headset into headset jack on the left side of the phone to activate this menu. You can turn on the radio by long press of the Radio hot key ( ). The following screen is displayed. Preset channel display Frequency display Stereo indicator Frequency status bar Preset channel stations Volume level 1.
PAGE 251
FM Radio [Menu 6] 2. Press and hold down the corresponding number key of a channel to store the currently selected radio station into. “Done” message will be popped up and the selected channel will be coloured. Note: You can preset up to 10 channels. 3. After presetting radio channels, you can listen to other channel by pressing the corresponding number key (short press). 4. You can access the following option menus by pressing the left soft key [Options].
PAGE 252
FM Radio [Menu 6] • Maintain play If you set this option to On, the radio will keep playing even when you get out of the “Listen radio” menu and use other menu features. Note • When you receive a call, the radio is muted automatically, and you can answer the call by pressing the . When you end the call, the radio is resumed. • When you receive a message, you will hear the message receipt tone and the radio keeps playing. Channels [Menu 6-2] Opens up the channel list.
PAGE 253
Fun & Tools [Menu 7] Favorites [Menu 7-1] You can set up to 9 menus which you have used often in Favorites. You can connect this menu directly by pressing hot key . If you want to register the menu in favorites, select on a list. If the menu is already registered, the options are displayed as follows: - Select : Activate the registered menu. - Change : Change the menu. - Delete : Delete the registered menu. - Delete all : Delete all menus which are registered in Favorites.
PAGE 254
Fun & Tools [Menu 7] Calculator [Menu 7-3] This contains the standard functions such as +, -, x, ÷ : Addition, Subtraction, Multiplication, and Division. 1. Input the numbers by pressing numeric keys. 2. Use a navigation key to select a sign for calculation. 3. Then input the numbers. 4. Press [Result] to view the result. 5. Press [Reset] or enter numbers to repeat the procedure above. 6. Use key to erase any numbers or signs. 7. If you press If you press key, you can input a minus number.
PAGE 255
Fun & Tools [Menu 7] • Set as Wallpaper / Set as ring tone You can set downloaded sounds or pictures as wallpaper or Ring tone. • Delete You can delete each downloaded content. • Delete all You can delete all downloaded contents. Unit converter [Menu 7-5] This converts any measurement into a unit you want. There are 4 types that can be converted into units: Length, Area, Weight, and Volume. 1. You can select one of four unit types by pressing 2. Select the standard value by using , [Unit] key. . 3.
PAGE 256
Fun & Tools [Menu 7] Voice recorder [Menu 7-7] The voice memo feature you to record up to 10 voice messages and each memo is up to 20 Seconds. Record [Menu 7-7-1] 1. You can record voice memo in Voice recorder menu and also holding down in the standby mode. 2. Once recording is started, the message Recording and the remaining time is displayed. 3. If you want to finish recording, press 4. Key in Voice memo title, press [Save]. [OK]. View list [Menu 7-7-2] The phone shows voice memo list.
PAGE 257
Internet [Menu 8] The phone supports services based on Wireless Application Protocol (WAP). You can access services supported by your network. The services menu allows you to get the information such as news, weather reports, and flight times. Home [Menu 8-1] Connect to a homepage. The homepage may be the site which is defined in the activated profile. It will be defined by Service Provider if you don’t make in activated profile. Bookmarks [Menu 8-2] Press to exit.
PAGE 258
Internet [Menu 8] - Bearer You can set the bearer data service. • Data • GPRS - Data settings Appeares only if you select Data settings as a Bearer\service. IP address : Enter the IP address of the WAP gateway you want. Dial number : Enter the telephone number to dial to access your WAP gateway. User ID : The users identity for your dial-up server (and NOT the WAP gateway). Password : The password required by your dial-up server (and NOT the WAP gateway) to identify you.
PAGE 259
Internet [Menu 8] - Connection type The options for connection type are Continuous, Temporary or HTTP and depend on the gateway you are using. Continuous A confirmed delivery mechanism but generates more network traffic. Temporary A non-confirmed (connectionless) service. - Proxy settings IP address : Input the IP address of the proxy. Port : Input the port number of the proxy. - DNS settings Insert the primary and secondary DNS if required by the network operator.
PAGE 260
Internet [Menu 8] Go to URL [Menu 8-4] You can directly connect to the site you want. You need to enter a specific URL. Cache settings [Menu 8-5] You can remove the contents of Cache memory or change the Cache mode. Clear cache [Menu 8-5-1] The contents of Cache memory will be removed. Check cache [Menu 8-5-2] You can set the option whether you will check the cache memory or not. Cookies settings [Menu 8-6] The information or services you have accessed are saved in the cache memory of the phone.
PAGE 261
Internet [Menu 8] Reset profiles [Menu 8-8] You can reset profiles to return to original settings. Browser version [Menu 8-9] The WAP Browser version is displayed.
PAGE 262
On browsing menu If you are on line, you can view the following menus. • Home Refer to [Menu 8-1]. • Reload Reloads the current page. • Bookmarks See [Menu 8-2]. • Save as bookmark You can save a site as bookmark. • Go to URL You can move to the site you want. In this menu, you can also edit the site address. • Clear cache The contents of cache memory will be removed.
PAGE 263
Java [Menu 9] Applications [Menu 9-1] Java Menu Options Scroll to an application and select Options. 1. New : You can create new folder. 2. Move : You can select a folder which you want. 3. About : Shows Java MIDP information. 4. Info : Displays information about the selected MIDlet. 5. Remove : Deletes the selected MIDlet. 6. Update : Accesses the server and updates the selected MIDlet. 7. Options : Some Java applications may require a data connection to be made. Select this to set the connecting options.
PAGE 264
Java [Menu 9] Profiles [Menu 9-3] Some Java applications may require a network connection to operate, for example, multiplayer games. You can set up to 5 profiles and activate the desired one. This is similar to wap profile setting. Refer to wap profiles when you set this. JAVA™‚ is a trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc.
PAGE 265
Accessories There are various accessories for your mobile phone. You can select these options according to your personal communication requirements. Battery pack Stereo Headset Includes earpiece and microphone so allows hands-free operation. Connect this to the phone to listen to the radio. Travel Adapter This charger allows you to charge the battery while away from home or your office. Data cable/CD You can connect your phone to PC to exchange the data between them.
PAGE 266
Care and Maintenance When using this unit, basic safety precautions as below should be always followed. • Do not disassemble this unit. (Take it to a qualified service technician when repair work is required.) • Away from electrical appliance such as a TV, radio or personal computer. • The unit should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators or cookers. • Do not drop. • Do not subject this unit to mechanical vibration or shock.
PAGE 267
Care and Maintenance Caring for the Battery • You do not need to completely discharge the battery before recharging. Unlike other battery systems, there is no memory effect that could compromise the battery’s performance. • Use only LG batteries and chargers. LG chargers are designed to maximize the battery life. • Do not disassemble or short-circuit the battery pack. • Keep the metal contacts of the battery pack clean. • Replace the battery when it no longer provides acceptable performance.
PAGE 268
Trouble Shooting This chapter lists some problems that you might encounter while using your phone. Some problems require that you call your service provider, but most of problems you encounter are easy to correct yourself. Message SIM error Possible causes There is no SIM card in the phone or you may have inserted it incorrectly. No connection Signal weak to the Outside GSM network network Possible Corrective measures Make sure that the SIM card is correctly inserted.
PAGE 269
Trouble Shooting Message Charging error Possible causes Possible Corrective measures Battery totally empty Temperature out of range Charge battery. Make sure the ambient temperature is right, wait for a while, and then charge again. Check power supply and connection to the phone. Check the battery contacts, clean them if necessary. Plug in to a different socket or check voltage. If the charger does not warm up, replace it. Only use original LG accessories. Replace battery.
PAGE 270
Technical Data General Product name : B2000 System : GSM 900 / DCS 1800 / PCS 1900 Ambient Temperatures Max : +55°C Min : -10°C B2000 User Guide 95
PAGE 271
PAGE 272
PAGE 273
PAGE 274